2009 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Front Seats
Your vehicle has power lumbar on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats.
Power Seats
The seatback lumbar
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the
seat cushions.
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will come on to designate that only the seatback
is being heated. Additional presses will cycle through
the heat levels for the seatback only.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle has heated
front seats. The buttons
used to control this feature
are located on the front
door armrests. The engine
must be running for the
heated seat feature
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
Memory Seat
to work.
On vehicles with this
feature, the controls for the
memory function are
located on the driver door.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button
with the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the
button to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seat off.
The indicator lights above the button will come on to
designate the level of heat selected: three for high,
two for medium, and one for low. The low setting warms
the seatback and seat cushion until the seat temperature
is near body temperature. The medium and high
settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly
higher temperature. You will be able to feel heat in
about two minutes.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position and the
adjustable pedals, if equipped. The settings for these
features can be saved for up to two drivers.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the memory settings:
page 3-51 for more information.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar and the adjustable pedals,
if equipped, to the desired position.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
page 2-22 for more information.
Easy Exit Seat
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or
entering the vehicle. The power lumbar, recline, and,
if equipped, adjustable pedal, positions will not be stored
or recalled when using the easy exit seat function.
The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered memory
control button.
To recall the memory settings:
• Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is
in PARK (P). A single chime will sound and the
memory position will be recalled.
To store the easy exit seat position:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for less than three seconds. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
• If programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter will recall
the preset driver’s memory seat and adjustable
pedals position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
• If programmed to do so through the DIC, placing
the key in the ignition will recall the driver’s
memory seat and adjustable pedals positions.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power
seat control located on the
outboard side of the
To recall the easy exit seat position:
• Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The seat
will move to the stored exit position.
seat to operate them.
• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
on activating this feature in the DIC.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
If an easy exit seat position has not been stored,
the default position is all the way rearward.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up,
your safety belts cannot do their job when you are
reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it.
Head Restraints
To lower the head restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the seatback, and push the
head restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats which
provide additional cargo space.
2. Lift the lever, located
on the outboard side of
the seatback, and
fold the seatback
forward.
To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the
way as the seatback is folded down.
1. Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion
forward.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do the
following:
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright
position. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
2. Return the head restraints to the upright position
by reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward
until it locks into place. Push and pull on the
head restraint to make sure that it is locked.
3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, the child restraint locking
feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-59 for more information.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a
rollover event.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback or
from the storage pocket on the side of the seat.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide back onto its
storage clip located between the interior body and
the seatback or into the storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective
is wearing them properly.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface against
the back of the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{ CAUTION:
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with
the LATCH system.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Second Row
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The labels are located above a flap, at the base of
the seatback, in the rear outside seating positions.
The anchors are located under the flap. In order to get
to the anchors you will need to pull the strap at the
center of the seat where the seat cushion meets the
seatback. This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up
and out of the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors
and then lower the seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is
locked into place.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Do not use the rear tie-down brackets near the liftgate
for top tethers. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38 for additional information.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions in
this manual.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seat where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
This will allow you to fold the seat cushion
up and out of the way. Lift the flap to expose
the anchors and then lower the seat cushion.
additional information. Be sure the cushion
is locked into place.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle
has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions. If your vehicle
has a cargo shade, route the top tether
between the seatback and the cargo shade.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
Fold down the headrest or
head restraint and route
the single tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts. See Rear
page 1-8.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
Fold down the headrest or
head restraint and route
the dual tether around
the headrest or head
restraint. See Rear Seat
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
page 1-39 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
page 1-39 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
including important safety information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat
position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-39 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
for additional information.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-59 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-56.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seat. The sensors provide
information that is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-52. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part
of the airbag module.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard
seating positions in the first and second rows. The
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,
although no system can prevent all such ejections.
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror
when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
United States
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the
symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags and roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat i the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
{ CAUTION:
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in
a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a
rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-14.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates.
Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, rearview mirror, front sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-76
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim
is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed
for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top of the seat
fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-28 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
This vehicle has double-sided keys that can be used for
the ignition and door lock.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and
a key code number.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key code number tells your dealer/retailer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this
number in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will
be able to have new ones made easily using this
number. Your selling dealer/retailer should also have
this number.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The key cannot be removed from the ignition if your
vehicle does not have power. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 for additional information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
Q (Lock): Press to lock all
the doors. Press Q again
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
within three seconds
and the horn may chirp.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
The parking lamps may flash and the interior lights
come on. Press K again and all remaining doors unlock.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
To program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC), see Driver Information
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 30 feet (9 m) away from the vehicle.
L (Panic Alarm): Press to sound the horn.
The headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds.
To turn the alarm off, press L again, or wait 30 seconds,
or start the vehicle.
The RKE transmitter buttons do not operate when the key
is in the ignition.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery:
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB # BATTERY
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB #
BATTERY LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-45.
1. Remove the screw from the back of the RKE cover
to open the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace with a CR2032
or equivalent battery.
4. Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle. From the outside, use the remote keyless
entry transmitter or the key.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
From the inside, slide the
manual lever forward or
rearward.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using
the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button
on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter a
second time.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrests.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless
entry transmitter lock button is pressed.
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. To unlock
the doors, press the other side of the switch.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
Delayed Locking
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A chime
will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for
up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to ON/RUN and LOCK/OFF twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK/OFF, release the
turn signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,
you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock,
the horn will chirp twice, and a 30-second program
timer will begin.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
Programmable Locking Feature
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the two programming options
listed previously, and press the lock side of the
power door lock switch to cycle through the lock
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of (P) Park.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to ON/RUN. The locks will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the key to ON/RUN and LOCK/OFF twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK/OFF, release the
turn signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,
you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock,
the horn will chirp twice, and a 30-second program
timer will begin.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into (P) Park.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the four programming
options listed above, and press the unlock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds to
begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into (P) Park.
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is
shifted to (P) Park. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the four programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to ON/RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
See your dealer for more information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the
rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside
by passengers. To use one of these locks do the
following:
Lockout Protection
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a security
lock lever located on the inside edge of each
rear door.
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
2. Move the lever down
to engage the security
lock. Move the lever
up to disengage the
security lock.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
3. Close the door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liftgate Release
Liftgate/Liftglass
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked.
{ CAUTION:
Press the button on the liftglass to open it. To open the
entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the center of
the liftgate. When the liftgate is opened, the liftglass
will lock after a short delay.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in
the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
also has a switch for each of the passenger’s windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window
and pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you
hold the switch down for three to seven seconds
after the window has been completely lowered or raised,
the window will not operate for about 15 seconds.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the
driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap
the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top
of the switch.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center
mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side to cover
the driver or passenger side of the front window. Swing
the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. It can
also be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this
position.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
Window Lockout
o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and swing it to the side to cover the
side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps. The lamps will turn off when the cover
is closed.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off.
The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for
two minutes, and the horn will sound for 30 seconds,
then will turn off to save the battery power.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate
if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. You should also remember that you can start
your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is
equipped with a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
Here is how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
1. This device may not cause interference.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the SECURITY light comes on, there
may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III is a
passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key III to have
a new key made.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
When the PASS-Key III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a dealer/retailer can service PASS-Key III to
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake or slow the vehicle.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key III system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer/
retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key III
system at this time.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key III key, see your
dealer/retailer to have a new key made.
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering wheel can bind with the wheels turned off
center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from
right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch is
located on the center
console, and has
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position can be used
to operate the electrical accessories.
four different positions.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery
could be drained. You may not be able to start the
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
In order to shift out of P (Park), turn the ignition to
ON/RUN and apply the brake pedal.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. The key can only be removed when
the ignition switch is in LOCK/OFF and the vehicle
has power.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• DVD Player
• Power Windows
• Overhead console
• Sunroof (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can
be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, these features will continue
to work up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If the vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait
at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, repeat these steps.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the steering column.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer or farther away from you.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver side of the
engine compartment next to the battery box
facing the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Active Fuel Management™
If the vehicle has a 5.3L V8 engine, it has Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders, depending on driving
conditions.
{ CAUTION:
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
fuel economy. When greater power is required, such
as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a
freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
positions for the gear shift
lever.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have
to apply the brake pedal then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from P (Park)
when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park
on page 2-29.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
To shift to the 2 (Second) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button
is pressed, move the shifter to the 2 (Second) position.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to 3 (Third) or,
if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission
shifts too often.
You can also use 2 (Second) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of
D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
To shift to the 1 (First) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button
is pressed, move the shifter to the 1 (First) position.
To shift to the 3 (Third) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button
is pressed, move the shifter to the 3 (Third) position.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help you control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, while
using the brakes off and on.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you
can press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
foot and pull up on the
parking brake lever
located between
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Brake
the seats.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-29.
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
information.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from P (Park) without first pressing the
button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the key, the vehicle is in
P (Park).
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
driver seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park
on page 2-28.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever
button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION:
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to
CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass
Mirrors
Compass Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
There is a compass display on the upper right corner of
the mirror.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display.
Press O to turn the compass display on or off.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature
on or off.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold O to activate the compass calibration
mode. CAL displays in the compass window on the
mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle
is started.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If CAL appears
in the compass window, the compass may need to be
reset or calibrated.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight. Adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it is necessary to
adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to account
for compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold O until the zone number displays.
The number shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the window on the mirror by pressing the O button.
Once you find your zone number, release the button.
After about four seconds, the mirror returns to the
compass display, and the new zone number is set.
If CAL appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
Outside Power Mirrors
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver’s door.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions to see the
side of your vehicle and the area behind your
vehicle.
4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control to the
center position so the mirror cannot be moved.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror enters a ratcheting mode. This action
is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go no
further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by moving
the control in the opposite direction.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly
or annual subscription payment plan. If a payment
plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
For more information visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or press the OnStar
button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• Remote Diagnostics
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicles GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicles GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple
voice commands to browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being programmed.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button to be used to control the
garage door and the hand-held transmitter button.
Do not release the Universal Home Remote button
or the hand-held transmitter button until Step 4 has
been completed.
To program up to three devices:
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require substitution of Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing only
when the Universal Home Remote indicator light
begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously, the
programming is complete and the garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. There is no need
to continue programming Steps 6 through 8.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the
door does not move, press and hold the same button
a third time for two seconds, and then release.
It may be helpful to have another person assist with
the remaining steps.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the Universal
Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as this will
erase all previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
Cupholders
A cupholder is located on
the instrument panel next
to the radio.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the cupholder, push once on the support
and the cupholder will move into position for use.
To close the cupholder, lift the support up towards the
instrument panel.
Lift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key to
lock and unlock the glove box.
A cupholder is located on the front of the center
console and two more are located at the rear of the
center console. To use the rear cupholders, pull down
on the lid.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overhead Console
Luggage Carrier
For this vehicles with this feature, the overhead console
may include reading lamps, a Universal Home Remote,
and a moonroof switch. See the following for more
information:
{ CAUTION:
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that
is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can
cause a driver to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of
the vehicle.
Center Console Storage
Grasp the front lever on the center console while lifting
the top to open it.
The console may contain one or more of the following
components:
The vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier
that allows things to be loaded on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier, if equipped, has side rails attached
to the roof, and places to use for tying things down.
These allow for thing to be loaded on the vehicle,
as long as they are not wider or longer than the
luggage carrier.
For vehicles with the center armrest compartment,
pull up on the latch handle located underneath the
front edge to lift the cover.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer/retailer.
Rear Floor Storage Cover
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage
the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
{ CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not secured
properly, it can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Be sure to secure any such item properly.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-21.
The vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage cover.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check
now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is locked
and cargo is still securely fastened.
To remove the rear floor storage cover, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the cover slightly to unhook it.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind
noise. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of
the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening
of the rear door.
3. Pull the cover towards the rear of the vehicle to
release it from the forward mounting slots.
To reinstall the rear floor storage cover, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the cover is secure by
applying slight pressure to the latch until it clicks.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
Cargo Cover
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
The cargo cover can be used to cover items in the
cargo area of the vehicle.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that the shade can be removed from the vehicle.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
{ CAUTION:
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown
about the vehicle during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be injured. If the cover
is removed, always store it in the proper storage
location. When it is replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The moonroof switch is
located in the overhead
console.
Cargo Tie Downs
Four cargo tie-downs are located in the rear
compartment of the vehicle. The tie-downs can
be used to secure small loads.
Moonroof
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
moonroof. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) must be active to operate it. See Retained
Press and release the back of the button to open the
moonroof. Press and hold the front of the button to close
the moonroof.
With the moonroof closed, press the front of the button
to open the moonroof to the vent position.
The moonroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade is in the closed
position, it will open when the moonroof is opened.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 3-19.
on page 2-24.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
O : Headlamps
Tilt Wheel
The tilt lever is on the
outboard side of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
2 3 : Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer
# : Fog Lamps
I : Cruise Control
Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to
change the position, then release the lever to lock.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a trailer towing option with added
wiring for the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator flashes
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure
they are working.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Turn Signal On Chime
A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal lever to off.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-107.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. Hold the lever down longer for more wipe
cycles.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets high-beam headlamps be used to
signal to a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
9 (Off): Turns off the wipers.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
& (Delay): Sets a delay between wipes. Turn the
delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, the high-beam headlamps turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is held toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
comes on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer the band is moved toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
Windshield Wipers
1 (High Speed): For wiping a high speed.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear window wiper/
washer control is located
to the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
Windshield Washer
L (Windshield Washer): Press the windshield
washer paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to the preset speed.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper
off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press = located in the
center of the control.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If windshield can be washed, but not the rear window,
check the fluid level.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
For vehicles with headlamp washers, they clear debris
from the headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with
fluid, waiting for about five seconds, then rinsing away
the loose debris.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
The headlamp washers are located under the
headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for one
wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front windshield washer
button is pressed for the first time after the vehicle is
turned on. The headlamps washers then activate
automatically for one cycle after every four front
windshield washes.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
washed.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you
could lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
The headlamp washers use the same fluid bottle as the
windshield washer. However, the headlamp washers
will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If the
windshield can be washed, but not the headlamps,
page 3-9 for more information.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise controls are
located on the end of the
turn signal/multifunction
lever.
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
R (On): Turns the system on.
1. Move the cruise control switch to R .
2. Get up to the desired speed.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Makes the vehicle accelerate
or resume to a previously set speed.
T (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
3. Press T at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
Some vehicles have a
cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that comes on when
the cruise control is
engaged.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
• Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it there
until the desired speed is reached, and then
release the switch. To increase the vehicle speed
in small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied. This disengages
the cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the cruise control switch briefly from R to S .
The vehicle returns to the chosen speed and stays there.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle will
keep going faster until the switch is released or the
brake is applied. So unless you want the vehicle to go
faster, do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until the
lower desired speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier.
speed. Press T at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. When the brakes are applied this disengages
the cruise control.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
Ending Cruise Control
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal,
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:
• move the cruise control switch to 9, or
O (On/Off): Turns off the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and Automatic Headlamps. Turning the
control to this position again turns the automatic
lighting system back on. This feature is not available
for vehicles first sold in Canada.
• shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak to activate.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns the exterior
lamps on and off depending upon how much light
is available outside of the vehicle.
• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak system activate,
if your vehicle has either feature.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When DRL are on, either the turn signal lamps or
headlamps will be on. If the vehicle has the High
Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system option, the
DRL system will turn on the turn signal lamps. If the
vehicle does not have HID, the DRL system will turn on
the headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker, and the instrument panel lights will not be on.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, if the driver’s
door is open and the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY. To turn the tone off, turn the knob
all the way counterclockwise.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition key is in LOCK/OFF.
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
When it is dark enough outside, the Automatic
Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when the
vehicle is started and after the transmission has
been shifted out of the P (Park) position. The
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and parking lamps
will come on. The instrument panel lights and radio lights
will also turn on at normal brightness. Once on, the
system remains on during these conditions even if the
vehicle is shifted back into P (Park).
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL will activate when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor or the system
may come on whenever the ignition is on and the
vehicle is shifted out of the P (Park) position.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system could also turn on the lamps when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems,
so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system are only affected when the
light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
# : The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog
lamps on and off.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
also turn on. A message will also display on the DIC
when the fog lamps are turned on or off. See Driver
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on after the transmission
is shifted out of P (Park). Once the vehicle leaves the
garage, it takes about one minute for the automatic
headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument panel cluster might
not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness control is in the full bright position.
• To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release it.
The band will return to its original position.
• If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog
lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
If the vehicle is running and the automatic headlamp
system is already on, it can be turned off by turning
and releasing the headlamp control at the off position.
The automatic headlamp system stays off until you
turn and release the headlamp control at the off position
When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a message
will appear on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located to the left of
the steering column on the instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the
interior lights.
E : Press to turn the dome lamps off. The dome lamps
will remain off when a door is open. This overrides
the illuminated entry feature unless the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press E
again. The dome lamps will come on when any
door is opened.
To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob completely
clockwise as far as it will go. The dome lamps stay
on until they are turned off.
Entry Lighting
Dome Lamps
The vehicle has entry lighting.
The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is
opened, unless the dome lamp override button is
pressed in.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps come on
as long as the dome override lamp override button is not
pressed in. When all the doors are closed, the lamps
stay on for a short period of time and then turn off
automatically. If you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior
lamps come on for a short time whether or not the dome
lamp override is on.
The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the
farthest position.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome
override is off, these lights will stay on for a short period
of time and then will go out.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Reading Lamps
Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading
lamps located in the overhead console to turn them
on or off.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If this message is displayed, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, and vanity
lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when
the ignition is off. This helps to keep the battery from
running down.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
• Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
This feature also turns off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left
on. Turn the exterior lamps knob to turn them back on.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
The vehicle has three accessory power outlets. There
are two outlets located below the climate controls
and one outlet is on the rear of the center floor console.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet.
Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Recirculation
G. Air Conditioning
H. Defrost
I. Air Delivery
Mode Control
J. Rear Window Defogger
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Outside Air Temperature Display
A new outside temperature reading is displayed if the
vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours,
the old temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take several
minutes of driving before the display updates to
the actual outside temperature.
With this system the heating, cooling and ventilation can
be controlled on the vehicle. When the vehicle is first
started and the climate control system is on, or if
the climate control system has been turned on, the
display shows the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds. Then it shows the outside temperature.
A. Driver and Passenger C. Display
Side Temperature
Controls
D. AUTO
E. Power Button
B. Fan Control
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Manual Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system controls the air delivery mode,
fan speed, and temperature inside the vehicle.
9 (Off): Press to turn off the entire climate control
system. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and will be
directed to the floor. The system turns on by pressing
either AUTO, air delivery mode, fan control, or by
adjusting either temperature knob.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward
the driver. This knob can also adjust the passenger
side temperature setting if the two are linked.
1. Press AUTO.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning and
air inlet are automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor will run continuously when
the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set
to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet
automatically changes to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the vehicle.
Passenger Side Temperature Knob: Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the
passenger. The passenger temperature setting can be
set to match and link to the driver’s temperature
setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for
three seconds. When adjusting the driver side
temperature setting, the passenger side temperature
setting will follow and both arrows will appear on
the display. The passenger side temperature setting
also resets and re-links to the driver side temperature
setting if the vehicle has been off for more than
three hours.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to adjust. Turn the driver or
passenger side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If a temperature
setting of 60°F (15°C) is chosen, the system will
remain at the maximum cooling setting. If a
temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) is chosen, the
system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
w 9 x (Fan Control): Press the arrows to increase
or decrease the fan speed. The display shows the
selected fan speed and the driver side temperature
setting for five seconds.
0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to
clear the windows of fog or frost more quickly. The
system automatically controls the fan speed if defrost is
selected from AUTO mode. If the outside temperature
is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, the air conditioning compressor
runs automatically to help dehumidify the air and dry
the windshield.
C (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press to change the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle. The air delivery
modes will appear on the display as it is being adjusted.
The display shows the selected air delivery mode and
the driver temperature setting for five seconds.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. When the system is on,
the system automatically begins to cool and dehumidify
the air inside of the vehicle. The air conditioning
symbol appears on the display when the air conditioning
is on and turns off when the air conditioning is off.
To change the current air delivery mode, select one of
the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed toward the
windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
If the air conditioning is turned off while in front defrost
or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol turns off,
however, the A/C compressor remains on to help
de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of the other
modes is selected, the compressor will then turn the
A/C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button
is pressed.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets. Some air
also comes out of the defroster and side window
outlets. The recirculation button cannot be selected in
floor mode.
To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and humid
days at a temperature above freezing, press the
air conditioning button to run the A/C compressor. Also
it is best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode
except when maximum air conditioning performance is
needed or for short times to avoid exterior odors.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on. This mode recirculates and helps
to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used
to help prevent outside air and odors from entering
the vehicle. Recirculation mode can be used with vent
and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog or defrost modes.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger
on or off.
An indicator light comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If additional
warming time is needed, press the button again.
If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or
defrost modes, the indicator flashes three times
and turns off to indicate the selection is not available.
The heated mirrors will also come on when the rear
window defogger is turned on. See Outside Heated
The air conditioning compressor may also run while
in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent window fogging.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode.
If the windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost
mode and increase fan speed.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
engine is turned off.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Use the lower buttons on the rear seat audio to adjust
the rear seat climate controls. The temperature of the
air coming through the rear outlets is determined by
the front passenger’s temperature setting.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
sides of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves.
• When entering the vehicle in cold weather, select
maximum blower speed for a few moments before
driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of the window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
the vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of the
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
A. Fan Control
B. Power Button
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
z 9 y (Fan): Press to increase or decrease the fan
speed.
z \ y (Mode): Press to change the direction of
airflow in the rear seat area to either vent, bi-level or
floor mode.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (On/Off): Press to turn the rear climate controls on
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
or off.
The rear control only turns on if the front control is on
and not in defrost mode.
Climate Controls Personalization
The vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
Climate control settings can be stored and recalled for
temperature, air delivery mode and fan speed for
two different drivers. The personal choice settings
recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter
the vehicle. After the button with the unlock symbol
on a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the
climate control will adjust to the last settings of the
identified driver. The settings can also be changed by
pressing one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) located on
the driver’s door. When adjustments are made, the
new settings are automatically saved for the driver.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer the vehicle speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer works together with the Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer.
See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-42.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new
one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old
odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per minute
(rpm).
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the
safety belt, unless the driver safety belt is already
buckled.
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
The driver safety belt light
comes on and stays on for
several seconds, then
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The rearview mirror has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on,
this gage shows the battery’s state of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading. This is normal. Readings between the low and
high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The voltmeter gage may also read lower when in
fuel economy mode. This is normal.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
United States
Canada
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Brake System Warning Light
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road
and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder
to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take
longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means your vehicle has a brake problem. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on.
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
StabiliTrak® Service Light
This light will come on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
This light will come on if a problem is detected in the
StabiliTrak® system.
page 4-6.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
During most driving conditions, this light will not come
on. If the StabiliTrak® System is actively controlling
the stability and/or traction of the vehicle, this light will
flash. This is normal.
United States
Canada
This light will come on if any portion of the system has
been manually turned off or a problem is detected
in the system.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine
coolant has overheated.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center, a
message will appear also, see DIC Warnings and
page 4-6 for more information.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started
and provides information
about tire pressures
and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
working.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is
page 5-59 for more information.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-67 for more information.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
United States
Canada
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This can take several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the vehicle still does not
pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-16.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Cruise Control Light
If your vehicle has a Driver
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Information Center (DIC),
this light will come on
when the cruise control
is set.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance
occurs.
The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed when the
reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may be
reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If this
light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair.
for more information.
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
Check Gages Warning Light
This light should come on
The check gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
The service all-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by
the system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system
is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly
diagnosing a malfunction.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on, the
liftgate or liftglass is not
completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
or liftglass even partially open.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
Fuel Gage
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
page 5-5.
United States
Canada
Check Gas Cap Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on if your
gas cap is not securely
fastened.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy,
customization features, and warning/status messages.
q (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-51 for more information.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
r (Fuel Information): Press this button to display the
fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
page 3-42 for more information.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
any warning or service messages.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure, and timer.
information.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center
of the instrument panel, above the radio. These buttons
are fuel information, trip information, customization,
and select. The button functions are detailed in the
following pages.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current and
past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Fuel Information Button
r (Fuel Information): Press this button to scroll
through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling. It is
based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to
change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you press and
hold the trip stem or the select button for more than
four seconds, the display will show the distance traveled
since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressures,
and timer.
Tire Pressures: On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), press the trip information
button until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display.
This mode shows the tire pressure in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the select
button to scroll through the following information:
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the trip stem located
on the instrument panel cluster with the vehicle off
will also display the odometer.
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
driver’s side tire.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
passenger’s side tire.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
driver’s side tire.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
passenger’s side tire.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which
the display will roll back to zero.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one after another.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
Some messages may not require immediate action.
Press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or
the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel
cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Customization Button
Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be removed from the DIC
display. Take any messages that appear on the display
seriously and remember that clearing the messages
will only make the messages disappear, not correct the
problem.
q (Customization): Press this button to access
the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the
settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-51 for more information.
Select Button
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will allow you to reset the
trip odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
to reset the message. This message clears itself
after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
This message displays if the washer fluid level is low.
Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid
reservoir clears this message. See Windshield Washer
10 seconds, or you can manually clear it from the
DIC display.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop
as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
page 5-65. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
page 3-34.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-34 for more information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
cooling system temperature gets hot. See Engine
action. This message clears when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message may display if the outside temperature
reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway.
Adjust your driving accordingly. If the temperature
rises to a safe level, the message clears. This message
clears itself after 10 seconds, or you can manually
clear it from the DIC display.
FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned off.
The message clears after 10 seconds. If you turn on the
high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps also turn off
and this message appears on the DIC. The fog lamps
turn back on again when you switch back to low-beam
information.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in the
transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
FRONT FOG LAMPS ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
This message displays if the fog lamps are turned on.
The message clears after 10 seconds. See Fog Lamps
page 3-6 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Low
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate
or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass.
and check for the message on the DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS
is not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)
This message displays if there is a problem with
the battery charging system. Under certain conditions,
the charging system light may also turn on in the
instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light
on page 3-30. The battery will not be charging at
an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to
enter the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safe
to drive, however you should have the electrical system
checked by your dealer/retailer.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak system
activates to maintain vehicle stability. Any combination of
engine speed management, brake traction control,
and stability control displays this message.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If this message displays, it means there may be a
problem with the StabiliTrak system. If this message
appears, try to reset the system by performing the
following: stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine
again. If this message still comes on, it means there
is a problem. You should see your dealer/retailer
for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you
do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display if driving conditions delay
StabiliTrak system initialization. This is normal. Once the
system initializes, this message will no longer be
displayed on the DIC.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
This message remains on until it is manually cleared
from the DIC display. The DIC message is also
cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when you press the StabiliTrak
button for more than five seconds or when stability
control has been automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak
button is located on the transmission shift handle.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to
attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road
conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your
page 4-20. To turn the StabiliTrak system back on,
press the StabiliTrak button again.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is
still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when you momentarily press
the StabiliTrak button located on the transmission
shift handle. In this mode, stability control and the
brake-traction control are functional. Engine speed
management will be modified and the driven wheels can
spin more freely. For more details on this mode, see
The message may display if the brake system warning light
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TURN SIGNAL ON
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
This message may display and a chime may sound if
the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. Fully
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lock Doors
DIC Vehicle Customization
Press q until LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR appears in
the display. To select your preference for automatic
locking, press r while LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through
the following settings:
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in P (Park). To avoid excessive
drain on the battery, it is recommended that the
headlamps are turned off.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
Press q to scroll through the available customizable
options.
for more information.
After pressing q , VEHICLE SETTINGS momentarily
displays before going to a customization option.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlock Doors
Lock Feedback
Press q until UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK appears in
the display. To select your preference for automatic
unlocking, press r while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK
is displayed on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through
the following settings:
Press q until LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH appears in
the display. To select your preference for the feedback
you receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press r while
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing r will scroll through the following settings:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will
chirp the second time you press the lock button.
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the RKE transmitter.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlock Feedback
Headlamp Delay
Press q until UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears
in the display. To select your preference for the
feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press
r while UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through the
following settings:
Press q until HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC appears in
the display. To select your preference for how long
the headlamps will stay on after you turn off the vehicle,
press r while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through
the following settings:
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default):
The headlamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC: The headlamps will stay
on for 20 seconds.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the RKE transmitter.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC: The headlamps will stay
on for 40 seconds.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute): The headlamps
will stay on for 1 minute.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will
chirp the second time you press the unlock button.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN: The headlamps will stay
on for 2 minutes.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN: The headlamps will stay
on for 3 minutes.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF: The headlamps will not
turn on.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perimeter Lights
Easy Exit Seat
Press q until PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON appears in the
display. To select your preference for perimeter lighting,
press r while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed
Press q until EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF appears in the
display. To select your preference for seat position
exit, press r while EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF is
on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through the following
settings:
displayed on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through
the following settings:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds,
if it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
for more information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Recall
Alarm Warning
Press q until SEAT RECALL: OFF appears in the
display. To select your preference for recall of the
driver’s memory seat and adjustable pedals, if your
vehicle has this feature, press r while SEAT
RECALL: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing r
will scroll through the following settings:
Press q until ALARM WARNING: BOTH appears in the
display. To select your preference for alarm warning,
press r while ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through the following
settings:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will only
be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2 is pressed.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’s memory seat
and adjustable pedals position you saved will be
recalled when you put the key in the ignition.
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Whichever
position, 1 or 2, you programmed with the transmitter
being used to unlock the vehicle is the one that will
be recalled.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
for more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language
Units
Press q until LANGUAGE: ENGLISH appears in the
display. To select your preference for display language,
press r while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing r will scroll through the following
settings:
Press q until UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) appears in the
display. To select the units of measurement in which
the DIC will display vehicle information, press r while
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing r will scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default): All information
will be displayed in English units.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
UNITS: METRIC (km/L): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press q while the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
To select a setting and exit out of the customizable
options, press q while the desired setting is displayed
on the DIC.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold q and the trip
information button at the same time. The DIC will begin
scrolling through the languages in their particular
language. English will be in English, Francais will be in
French, and Espanol will be in Spanish. When you see
the language that you would like, release both buttons.
The DIC will then display the information in the language
you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Setting the Clock
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM
displays. Press and hold M until the correct minute
displays. The clock can be set with the ignition on or off.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM, press the DISP button while in XM mode to
retrieve four different categories of information related
to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in
the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until the desired option displays, then hold
this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds and the
selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise while driving by increasing
the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Playing the Radio
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL, or depending
on the radio, MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL. Each
higher setting provides more volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds. The volume level should always
sound the same while driving. NONE displays if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF
(automatic volume off) displays.
P (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn to increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): Press to display the time, while the
ignition is turned off.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service and MP3
Features): If the current station has a message, the
information symbol displays. Press this button to see the
message. The message can display the artist, song
title, call in phone numbers, etc.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the information
button. A new group of words display after every press
of this button. Once the complete message displays,
the information symbol disappears until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the information button. The last
message can be viewed until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
t SEEK u: Press and release to go to the previous or
the next station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN displays and one beep
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning.
When a message is not available from a station,
No Info displays.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN displays and the
two beeps sound. The radio goes to a preset station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons) (Radio with Six-Disc
CD Player): Press this button to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
The radio only scans preset stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2, can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons. To program stations:
e (Bass/Treble): Push and release until BASS or
TREB (treble) displays, then turn e to increase or to
decrease the tone. The display shows the bass or
the treble level. If a station is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold e. One beep
sounds.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ (automatic equalization) to select
the equalization.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set,
returns and the equalization that was selected is
stored for that pushbutton.
position, push and hold e when no tone or speaker
control displays. ALL CENTERED displays and a
beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The equalization one through seven options are included
only if the vehicle has the Bose® system. Press the
AUTO EQ button to select equalization settings
designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release e until BASS and TREB displays.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
To select and find a desired category:
the right and the left speakers, push and release e until
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category displays.
BAL (balance) displays. Turn e to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
3. Press either SEEK arrow, once the desired category
is displayed, to go to that category’s first station.
speakers, push and release e until FADE displays.
Turn e to move the sound toward the front or the rear
speakers.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again, to go to another
station within that category and the category is
displayed. If CAT disappears from the display,
go back to Step 1.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push e, then push it
again and hold it until one beep sounds.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
CAT to time out.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold e when no tone or speaker
control is displayed. ALL CENTERED displays and a
beep sounds.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last station
being played.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD is inserted, READING and the CD symbol
displays. As each new track starts to play, the track
number also displays.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Displays if the radio is
no longer calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
LOC (Locked): Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
To insert one CD:
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
1. Turn the ignition on.
section for further detail.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of
the slot, to turn green.
Playing a CD
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
To insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISP (display) knob.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Turn the ignition on.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to
the right of the slot, flashes and LOAD # displays.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the
CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player
pulls the CD in.
Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs:
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light flashes
again. After the light stops flashing and turns green,
load another CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to the
right of the slot, flashes and EJECT ALL displays.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # displays. The CD ejects and
can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light flashes
again and another CD ejects.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player. If CD is pushed
back into the player, before the 25 second time ends,
the player senses an error and tries to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the display.
To play a specific CD, first press the CD button, then
press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to
the CD. A small bar appears under the CD number that
is playing and the track number appears on the display.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject
a CD after it is pushed in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer resets at each press of the eject
button, causing the player to not eject the CD until
the 25-second time period has elapsed.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of CDs
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R quality,
the method of recording, the quality of the music that
has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
in their original cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch
the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
1r (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse within the
track.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward within
the track.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. A beep sounds and
RANDOM ALL displays. Press this button again to
turn off random play.
N (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track or
an entire CD can be repeated.
To use repeat:
• To repeat the current track, press and release N .
RPT ON displays. Press N again to turn off repeat
play. RPT OFF displays.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current or the previous track. Press the right arrow to go
to the start of the next track. If a track is approximately
10 seconds into its song, press either the left or right
arrow twice to get to the previous or next track.
• For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, repeat the CD
you are listening to by pressing and holding N for
two seconds. RPT ON displays. Press N again to
turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds until one beep sounds and SCAN displays.
The CD searches the previous or next tracks at
two seconds per track. Press either arrow to stop
scanning.
4 y (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM ON displays.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF displays.
To scan all loaded CDs on a Radio with Six-Disc CD
player, press and hold either arrow for more than
four seconds until CD SCAN displays and a beep sounds.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either arrow again, to stop
scanning.
y (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
The CD tracks can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random:
• To play the tracks on the CD in random order,
press and release the random button. RANDOM
ONE displays. Press this button again to turn
off random play.
DISP (Display): Press to see how long the current
track has been playing. The elapsed time of the track
appears on the display. To change the default on
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the display, track or elapsed time, press this button until
the desired option displays, then hold the button for
two seconds. One beep sounds and the selected display
becomes the default.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
B (CD): Press to play a CD when listening to the
radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is set whenever a CD is played.
See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information.
If an EQ setting for a CD is selected, it is activated
each time a CD plays.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
The vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R disc. For more information on how to play an MP3
this section.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names can
use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders can also be played.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player
allows access and navigates up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum will not play.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn an MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc while burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder is not
displayed.
Tracks play in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
No Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the first
track of the first folder or root directory.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name displays.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
1 r (Reverse): Press to reverse within the same
track. If 1 r is held or pressed more than once, the
player continues moving backward through the CD.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward within the
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
track. If 2 [ is held or pressed more than once,
the player continues moving forward through the CD.
3 N (Repeat): Press to hear a track over again.
RPT On displays. The current track continues to repeat.
Press again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF displays.
Playing an MP3
4 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays.
To insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or the DISP (display) knob.
folder or playlist, press and release 4 y . FLDR RDM
displays. Once all of the tracks in the current folder
or playlist have played, the system moves on to the
next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracks in
random order.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play all the tracks on the CD in random order, press
The radio scans the previous or next tracks at two tracks
per second. Release the arrow to stop scanning and
to play the track.
and hold 4 y for two seconds. A beep sounds and
CD RDM displays. This feature does not work with
playlists.
DISP (Display): Press to switch between track
mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display shows only eight characters, but there can
be up to four pages of text. If there are more than
eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist name,
pressing DISP within two seconds takes the CD to the
next page of text. If there are no other pages to be
shown, pressing DISP within two seconds takes the CD
to the next display mode.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow takes the CD to the next or previous randomized
track.
Press and release 4 y again to turn off random play.
NO RDM displays.
5 ! (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track
in the previous folder. Pressing 5 ! while in folder
random mode takes the CD to the previous folder and
randomizes the tracks in that folder.
• Track mode displays the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
6 # (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in the
next folder. Pressing 6 # while in folder random
mode takes the CD to the next folder and randomizes
the tracks in that folder.
• Time of day mode displays the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until the desired option displays, then hold
this knob for two seconds. One beep sounds and the
selected display becomes the default.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to
the start of the next track. Press either arrow for
more than two seconds and SCAN displays.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 (Information): INFO displays whenever a current
XM Radio Messages
track has ID3 tag information. Press 4 to display
the artist name and album contained in the tag.
INFO disappears from the display when the information
in the ID3 tag has finished.
xL (Explicit Language Channels): These
channels, or any others, can be blocked by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
B (CD): Press to play a CD when listening to the
radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is set whenever a CD is played.
See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information.
If an EQ setting is selected for a CD, it is activated
each time a CD plays.
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button
is pressed first.
Loading: The radio system is acquiring and processing
audio and text data. No action is needed. This message
should disappear shortly.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
XM Locked: The XM receiver in the vehicle may have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
CH Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
XM Lock: The XM receiver in your vehicle could have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be received
with your XM Subscription package.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, there could be a
receiver fault., this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume
level. The adjusted volume level remains in memory
for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum
volume level is used if the volume is turned down
too low.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The system can be used
while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up
to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the g button located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
Voice Recognition
g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• Dial
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• Digit Dial
• Call
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
• Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Using the Digit Dial Command
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Press g
and begin speaking to answer the call.
4. Once the call is connected, press g to link all the
callers together.
Ending a Call
Call Waiting
To end a call:
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• Press g to answer an incoming call when another
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
2. Say “End Call”. The call is then ended.
• Press g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
To Mute a call
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press g . The system responds
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Cancel Mute
During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press g
for more than two seconds. The audio switches from
the cell phone to the vehicle.
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
1. Press and hold g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds
with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Information
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD player,
a video display screen, two sets of wireless headphones,
and a remote control.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Before You Drive
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only,
not intended for the driver while driving.
Parental Control
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This button can also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Headphones
To change the batteries on the headphones:
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may be
lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
or use XM Satellite Radio Service, the audio for
these sources is heard, instead of the DVD or CD that
is currently playing through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the
PAL system. To change the video format:
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that the vehicle has for more
information.
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system can be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the
RSE system power is on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 3-95 for more information.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is printed
on the jacket of most DVDs.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen is in the
closed position, the signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD or use XM Satellite Radio Service,
the audio for these sources is heard, instead of the
DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on
the DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu): Press to adjust the color, tint,
brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic range
compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
O (Power): Press to turn the RSE system on and off.
The power indicator light illuminates when the power
is on.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold until the default setting displays.
X (Eject): Press to eject a DVD or CD.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold z
to display and to remove the track and time information.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD or CD. Press twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
arrows to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some DVDs
will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the
on-screen instructions.
DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
c / X (Stop/Eject): Press to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than three seconds
to eject a DVD or CD.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or
when RAP is active.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period
of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by the warranty. Storage
in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press to turn the DVD player on and off.
v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main
menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrows to navigate through a menu.
z (Set-up Menu): Press to adjust the color, tint,
brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic range
compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e (Audio): Press to display a menu that only appears
while a DVD is being played. The format and content
of this function will vary for each disc.
P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control
backlight on. The backlight times out after about 7 to
10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the
backlight is on.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the DVD or
CD. To stop fast reversing, press again. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD or CD. Press twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
highlighted in any menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter. Press again to
return to the previous track or chapter. This button
might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
| (Camera Angle): Press to change camera angles
on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
{ (Subtitle): Press to turn on subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. The
format and content of this function will vary for each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter,
title, and track numbers greater than 9. Press before
inputting the number.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD
or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press again. This button
might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
\ (Clear): Press within three seconds to clear a
number that has been entered.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not
be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light flashes.
When the DVD is playing, press this button then press
the fast forward button. The DVD continues playing
in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode, press
this button.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to advance to the
beginning of the next track or chapter. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Battery Replacement
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
To change the remote control batteries:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored in
it was pulled back into the the DVD player. Press the
DVD player.
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
eject button again to eject
the disc.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices. Change the
Video Format to PAL or
NTSC. See “Stereo RCA
Jacks” previously for
how to change the video
format.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
picture moves or scrolls.
I push Play but
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
The language in the audio Check the audio or
or on the screen is wrong. language selection in the
main DVD menu.
The remote control
does not work.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
The audio from the radio The RSE is working
for the Radio with
correctly.
Use the wireless
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio headphones or have the
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to select and
listen to any of the available radio sources: AM/FM,
XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear seat passenger
cannot control a source selected on the radio by
someone in the front of the vehicle. For example, the
RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the radio is
set to CD. Also, if the radio is switched to a source
the RSA has control of, sound will not be lost, but the
RSA will lose control of that source.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Rear seat passengers always have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition key
is positioned in the power mode.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are sources that are internal to the radio, such as
AM/FM, and CD and other sources to radio that are
external, such as XM, DVD, and OnStar®. If an external
source has been selected, the rear seat passengers
cannot select a different external source.
SEEK: Press to go to the next station or CD track and
stay there. The display will show the selection. This
function is inactive if the radio is set to the same source.
To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the
SEEK button for two seconds and the radio will go to
the next preset station. Hold this button down and
the radio will continue to go through all available preset
stations. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA on or off. The rear
speakers are muted when the power is turned on.
u (Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand knob
controls the headphone outlet on the right. Turn
either knob clockwise to increase the volume and
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press and
hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go to the next
CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press to select an audio source:
AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD, or DVD will
remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
u SEEK t: Press to go to the next or to the previous
radio station and stay there. The radio will only seek
stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
and LOCKED displays if the radio is stolen or moved
to a different vehicle.
When a CD is playing, press the forward or the back
arrow to fast forward or reverse.
g (Mute/ Voice Recognition): For vehicles with
OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems press g to interact with
information.
When the when the ignition is in the off position, a
blinking red light on the upper left side of the radio
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If the vehicle does not have OnStar, press g to silence
the vehicle speakers only. Press g again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
NXT (Next): Press to play a station that is programmed
on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio only seeks
preset stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press NXT to
go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are loaded.
+ SRC − (Source): Press to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2, or a CD. If a CD is loaded
the CD symbol will appear on the display.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
+ VOL − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the volume.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM Satellite Radio Service
AM
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on the radio.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cellular Phone Usage
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast becomes slightly
bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You
slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on. This is normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
page 3-32.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines
antilock brake, traction and stability control systems and
helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle
in most driving conditions.
Brake Assist
Traction control activates when the controller senses
wheel spin. StabiliTrak will selectively apply the brakes
and reduce engine torque to help regain traction.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
Stability control activates when the controller senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is travelling. StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to
help guide the vehicle in the intended direction.
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. If driving conditions
delay system initialization, the STABILITRAK NOT
READY message may be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). If this is the case, the vehicle
does not need servicing.
For more information on the stability messages, see
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the StabiliTrak
TRACTION CONTROL OFF — The driver can modify
the engine speed management system by momentarily
pressing the StabiliTrak button on the transmission shift
handle. The StabiliTrak light will come on and TRACTION
CONTROL OFF will be displayed. Momentarily pressing
the StabiliTrak button again will return the system to the
STABILITRAK ON mode.
system is both on and
actively controlling the
stability of the vehicle, the
StabiliTrak light will blink for
the duration of the event.
STABILITRAK OFF — The driver can turn off StabiliTrak
by pressing the StabiliTrak button for more than
five seconds. The StabiliTrak light will come on and
STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed. For vehicles
without a DIC, the StabiliTrak indicator light will come
on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button
again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON
mode. See StabiliTrak Off below for more information.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal.
The StabiliTrak disable
button is located on the
transmission shift handle.
Traction Control Off
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to activate
more frequently. If the controller detects excessive wheel
spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak indicator light may
blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be
displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur
to the transfer case.
The StabiliTrak system has three modes of operation:
STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
and STABILITRAK OFF.
STABILITRAK ON — The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak light will be off and no DIC
messages will be displayed.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you may want to “rock” the vehicle in an
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
information.
StabiliTrak Off
In this mode, both stability control and part of the
traction control system are disabled. The vehicle will still
have brake-traction control, but will not be able to use
the engine speed management system. System
noises maybe heard as a result of the brake-traction
control coming on. If the controller detects excessive
wheel spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak indicator
light may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
may be displayed to warn the driver that damage
may occur to the transfer case.
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak system
events and the corresponding messages and lights that
will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
StabiliTrak Indicator
Light
DIC Message
None
Event
StabiliTrak On mode (System is fully enabled, but is not
actively controlling vehicle stability).
Off
Solid
Solid
Traction Control Off
StabiliTrak Off
Traction Control Off Mode
StabiliTrak Off Mode (StabiliTrak indicator light will flash
when system first enters this mode).
StabiliTrak system activates using engine speed
management, brake traction control, and/or stability control.
Blinking
StabiliTrak Active
Solid
Solid
Service StabiliTrak
StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a system fault.
StabiliTrak Not Ready
StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a failure to initialize.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not allow
the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. This
could lead to damage to the transfer case and costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
If cruise control is being used when the system activates,
the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will
automatically disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
StabiliTrak will turn off automatically if a problem is
detected in the system. The StabiliTrak light will come
on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on the
DIC. If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message does
not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and messages are
displayed.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect the vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
StabiliTrak may activate on dry or rough roads or under
conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this
happens, a reduction in acceleration may be noticed, or a
noise or vibration may be heard. This is normal.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Steering
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the
most traction to move the vehicle.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
at all times. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is
no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the
front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Off-Road Driving
Your vehicle does not have features like added ground
clearance, special underbody shielding, and a transfer
case low gear range, things that are necessary for
extended or severe off-road service. You should not
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more
limited.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When tired, pull off the road.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
• Do not drink and drive.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect
your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower
in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving
through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing
water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
on page 5-59.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
Windows clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
Winter Driving
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine
exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
unconsciousness and even death.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
{ CAUTION:
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-65.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
Your vehicle has an electronically controlled air
suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer for additional details.
{ CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a
trailer.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
{ CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods.
If the system overheats, all leveling function stops
until the system cools down. During this time, the
indicator light on the air inflator switch will be flashing.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” — towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, and “dolly
towing” — towing the vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,
in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height
after loading. The system can lower the vehicle to
the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition
on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
The compressor may be heard while it is operating
when the vehicle is being loaded, and periodically as the
system adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of
time, some bleed down of the suspension is normal.
Upon starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
Overload Protection
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
With this feature, an electronically controlled air
suspension system automatically keeps the vehicle level
as it is loaded and unloaded. The system includes a
compressor, two height sensors and two air springs
supporting the rear axle.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to
one minute without raising the vehicle depending on
the amount of overload. This will continue each time the
ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
below GAWR.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the
advice in this section and see your dealer/retailer for
important information about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/
retailer for advice and information about towing a
trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• The weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for the vehicle.
Vehicle
AWD (4.2 L L6 Engine)
AWD (5.3 L V8 Engine)
AWD (6.0 L V8 Engine)
Axle Ratio
3.73
Max. Trailer Wt.
5,600 lbs (2 540 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
*GCWR
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.73
4.10
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for
the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will
position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help
reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as
well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire Label located on the B-pillar below the
for more information. Make sure not to go over the GVW
limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing
hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before
applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can be
put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The
effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
loading and good handling when driving. Always use a
sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these
limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to
help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just
enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,500 lbs
(680 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
brake system.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be
adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a properly mounted
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper
size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.
Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind
that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as
responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection
at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic
transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning
the engine off. For vehicles with manual transmissions,
let the engine run while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of gear and the parking
brake applied, for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Trailer Wiring Harness
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule
or Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
The vehicle may have a seven-wire trailer towing
harness. This harness may have a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped with the
trailering package) that is attached to a bracket on
the hitch platform or included with the four-pin trailer
towing harness. If the vehicle is not equipped with the
heavy-duty trailer connector, one may be purchased
from your dealer/retailer.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
The vehicle may be equipped with a four-pin trailer
towing harness. This harness has a four-pin trailer
connector that contains the following trailer circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Running Lamps
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Running Lamps
• White: Ground
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
This harness also contains the following trailer circuits
that are not connected to the four-pin trailer connector:
• Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring terminal
must be fastened to a stud on the underhood
electrical center before the trailer feed will become
active.)
• Light Green: Back-Up Lamps
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
• Red: Battery Feed
If towing a light-duty trailer with a standard four-way
round pin connector, an adapter connector is available
from your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle is a 9–7X Aero, a trailer wiring harness
extension, and instructions for installing this extension,
were provided when the vehicle was delivered.
This extension will allow the vehicle’s trailer wiring
harness to be more easily accessible. There is a
four-way connector on the harness. A seven-way
adapter plug is also included if the trailer requires it.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, turn on the
headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage and
properly charge the battery.
The vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
trailer brake controller. These wires are located inside the
vehicle on the driver’s side under the instrument panel.
These wires should be connected to an electric trailer
brake controller by your dealer/retailer or a qualified
service center.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
Accessories and Modifications
When you add non-dealer/non-retailer accessories to
your vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use on non-Saab certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under
the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Saab accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your Saab
dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
Saab accessories. When you go to your Saab dealer
and ask for Saab accessories, you will know that
Saab-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine Saab accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can.
Doing Your Own Service Work
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
the Vehicle
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every
engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There may also be a light that comes on in the instrument
panel to let you know if the gas cap is not properly
more information.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-34.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-34.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood latch up and to the right to
release it, then lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat
the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
on page 5-29.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
on page 5-29.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Under Engine Cover).
See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil
on page 5-18.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
L6 Engine
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or
the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for
the V8 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, the engine
could be damaged.
6.0L V8 (VIN Code H) Engine Only
Remove the engine cover to access the engine oil
fill cap:
1. Remove the screw in the center of the cover.
2. Remove the cover from the stud on the driver side.
3. Pull the cover up and off the bracket.
4. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
Except 6.0L V8
(VIN Code H) Engine
6.0L V8
(VIN Code H) Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• SAE 5W-30
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Except Vehicles with 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)
Engine
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
For 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H) Engine
Vehicles Only
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine
oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not
be available. You can add substitute oil designated
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil change.
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
Except Vehicles with 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)
Engine
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System:
1. Use the fuel button on the Driver Information Center
to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.
2. Press and hold the select button on the Driver
Information Center five seconds while ENGINE
OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display for 10 seconds to
let you know the system is reset.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner/filter
and lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing.
Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt
as possible.
4.2L L6 Engine shown,
5.3L and 6.0L V8
Engines similar
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{ CAUTION:
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gage moves
and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Reinstall it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again. If the dipstick does
not go down the tube easily, turn the blade and
try again until it is fully inserted in the tube.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then remove the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
The automatic transmission
dipstick handle with this
symbol on it is located in
the engine compartment on
the passenger side of the
vehicle.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, reinstall
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
for more information on location.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings persist,
contact your dealer/retailer.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid” earlier in this section.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{ CAUTION:
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5.3L V8 Engine shown, 4.2L L6 and 6.0L V8 Engines
similar
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL®. This coolant is designed to remain in the
vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
What to Use
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant level should be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, there may be a leak in the
cooling system.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start the vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Engine
proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
information on location.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on the vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler
neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of
the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture through the
filler neck until the level reaches the base of the
filler neck.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-45 for more information.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
{ CAUTION:
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Engine Fan Noise
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
The vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while
stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
You may also hear this fan noise when the engine is
started. The sound will go away as the fan clutch
disengages.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level should
be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the 5.3L
or 6.0L V8 engines, the level should be at the FULL
mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN, but not over the
MAX mark.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
What to Add
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{ CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in N (Neutral).
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use this
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
battery. The remote negative (−) terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with
the 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive
bracket for vehicles with the 5.3L or 6.0L V8
engines, and is marked GND (Ground). See Engine
information on location.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
{ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine shown,
6.0L V8 Engine
similar
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine, and
on the accessory drive bracket for the 5.3L or
6.0L V8 engines.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For all vehicles, excluding vehicles equipped with the
6.0L V8 engine, the proper level is from 0 to 0.40 inch
(0 to 10 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.0L V8 engine, the
proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to
40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located
on the rear axle differential cover.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 0.50 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
{ CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that
the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
to access the electrical connectors.
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to release
the headlamp assembly from the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb cover for the high beam (A) and
low beam (B) bulbs.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Plug the electrical connector into the new bulb using
care not to touch the glass with your fingers.
8. Turn the new bulb clockwise to install it in the
socket.
9. Reinstall the bulb covers.
10. Push the headlamp assembly back into place in the
vehicle.
11. Press down on the retaining clips to secure the
headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the bulb socket that needs to be replaced
by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the old bulb.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
page 5-51 to access the front turn signal,
sidemarker or parking lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the
headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp
retaining clips.
A. Back-up Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
7. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
page 2-12.
2. Remove the screws
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
from the taillamp
assembly.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up the
locator pins with the retainers in the body of the
vehicle.
9. Reinstall the two screws.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate
lamp lens.
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp
Front/Rear Sidemarker
License Plate Lamp
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam
5702 NAK
194
W5W
9005
H11
Low-Beam (Halogen Only)
Rear Turn Signal
3757 AK
3157
Stoplamp and Taillamp
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten
the screws.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced be
sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will continue
to have the benefits an acoustic windshield can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the
wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the
park rest position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of
the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and
push the blade away from the wiper arm.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
{ CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
Tire Sidewall Labeling
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they
are classified as low-profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement. You may also
notice more road noise with low-profile
performance tires and that they tend to wear
faster.
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information,
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the passenger (P-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed
ratings range from A to Z.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-65.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-21.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
If your vehicle has P255/55R18 size tires installed
on the rear axle, they will require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above
99 mph (160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for the
rear tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 36 psi (248 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example:
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to
the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim
flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 36 psi (248 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to
the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires installed
on the rear axle, they will require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above
99 mph (160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for the
rear tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Example:
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (262 kPa).
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
page 3-45.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire
page 5-65.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire
pressure condition exists. Tire pressure levels may also
be checked using the Driver Information Center (DIC)
steering wheel control buttons. See “Tire Pressures”
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, you will need to start over with step
number one.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or
more than five minutes to match all four tire and
wheel positions the matching process stops and
you will need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS
warning light is still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF to exit the sensor matching
process. If the TPMS warning light is not flashing,
the five minute time limit has passed and you
will need to start the process over beginning
with Step 1.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parking lamps
four times within three seconds. A double horn
chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light
will begin to flash. The double horn chirp and
flashing TPMS warning light indicate that the TPMS
matching process has started. The TPMS warning
light should continue flashing throughout the
matching procedure.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-21.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
{ CAUTION:
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC spec number will
be followed by a MS, for mud and snow. See Tire
information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
information on proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control; and stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saab
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a Saab
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or, to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available may vary with respect to
these grades, they must also conform to federal
safety requirements.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{ CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose
control. You could have a collision in which you or
others could be injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far it
has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
original equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage to
the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash. Use another type of
traction device only if its manufacturer recommends
it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in Neutral.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare located underneath your
vehicle.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle while it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
page 2-12 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the extension (C).
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the socket end of the extension (C) on a
45 degree angle downward into the hoist drive
shaft hole. It is exposed when the rear gate is
open and is just above the rear bumper.
Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)
connects to the hoist shaft (B).
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the
tire has been completely lowered, and pull it
through the wheel opening.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the
spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-91 for more information.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all
the wheel nuts by
turning the nuts one
turn counterclockwise.
Do not remove
Front Position
Rear Position
C. Handle
them yet.
A. Front Frame/
Rear Axle
D. Extension(s)
B. Jack
E. Wheel Wrench
5. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
3. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
4. Place the handle, extension, and wheel wrench
onto the jack.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-82.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the cone
shaped end is toward the wheel.
11. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut cannot be turned by
hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer
as soon as possible.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to
use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace
them, be sure to get new original equipment wheel
nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and
have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
specification.
13. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing
instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from the under spare.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
{ CAUTION:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-83.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
11. If the spare tire is
hanging from the
cable, insert the socket
end of the extension
into the hoist shaft hole
on a 45 degree
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare the rest of the way.
angle downward.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
12. Be sure that the socket end of the extension
connects to the hoist shaft.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
CAUTION: (Continued)
from your vehicle. If this happened when your
vehicle was being driven, the tire might contact a
person or another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with its
valve stem pointing up.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.
{ CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted flat
or spare tire.
3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and to
the rear.
4. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
5. Put the socket end of the extension (C) through the
hole just above the rear bumper at a 45 degree
angle downward. Connect the socket end of
the extension to the hoist shaft (B).
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip
twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Remove the hubcap, if the vehicle has one, from the
flat tire by tapping the backside of the hubcap with
the wheel wrench (A). Store in a safe location until
the flat tire is repaired. Once the tire is repaired,
replace the hubcap.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Handle
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the
extension to tighten the cable.
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)
8. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next.
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B), and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or
store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need it
again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery
and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-101.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saab
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
The engine compartment fuse block is located in the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
1
3
Passenger Side Headlamp
High-Beam
4
5
Trailer Back-Up
Driver Side Headlamp High-Beam
2
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
6
Usage
Driver Side Headlamp Low-Beam
Windshield Wiper
Automatic Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Coils
Transmission Control Module
Canister
Ignition B
Airbag
Electric Brake
Horn
Ignition E
Fuses
29
30
31
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
61
66
67
Usage
Engine Control Module
Air Conditioning
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Injector 1
Passenger Side Trailer Turn
Driver Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Transmission
Oxygen Sensor B
Oxygen Sensor A
Injector B
Headlamp Drive Module
Truck Body Computer/Controller
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Ignition A1
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
Regulated Voltage Control
Air Solenoid
Electronic Throttle Control
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center (DIC)
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
Engine 1
Backup Lamps
Engine Control Module 1
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Trailer Stoplamp/Turn Signal
Trailer
24
17
32
33
34
25
26
27
28
Antilock Brake System
Ignition A
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
64
Usage
Usage
35
36
62
Blower
Ignition 1
Driver Side Headlamp
69
Air Solenoid
Passenger Side Headlamp
Misc.
48
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak®)
65
68
Instrument Panel Battery
Air Pump
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear underseat fuse block is located on the driver
side of the vehicle, under the second row seat. Pull the
seat cushion forward to access the fuse block.
Relays
37
Usage
Headlamp Wiper
Rear Windshield Wiper/Washer
Fog Lamps
38
39
40
Horn
41
Fuel Pump
42
Windshield Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
43
44
46
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
47
49
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Powertrain
60
63
Low-Beam Headlamps
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Usage
Passenger Door Control Module
Driver Door Control Module
Liftgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Blank
Blank
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
Rear Wiper
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
Passenger Door Module
Blank
Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps
Blank
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Passenger Side Rear Parking
Lamps
16
17
18
19
20
Locks
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module
Blank
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Usage
Fuses
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Usage
Front Parking Lamps
Rear Left Turn Signal
Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1
Front Right Turn Signal
Radio
Trailer Park
Rear Right Turn Signal
Blank
Auxiliary Power 1
Blank
Ignition 0
Four Wheel Drive
Blank
Front Left Turn Signal
Brakes
Locks
Blank
Blank
Unlock
Ignition 0
Overhead Battery/OnStar® System
Rainsense Wipers
Sunroof
Accessory
Parking Lamps
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
Ignition 3
Vehicle Stop
Transmission Control Module
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B
Truck Body Controller 4
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0L V8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0L V8 Engine
9.7 qt
11.2 qt
11.2 qt
9.2 L
10.6 L
10.6 L
7.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.6 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
22.0 gal
2.0 qt
Metric
83.3 L
1.8 L
Fuel Tank
Transfer Case Lubricant
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
5.0 qt
4.7 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
4.2L L6 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
S
M
H
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0L V8 Engine
Automatic
Automatic
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
{ CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message displays,
service is required for the vehicle. See DIC Warnings and
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnotes (g)
and (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service). See footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
•
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-56 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades
on page 5-102 for more information.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-66.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks, and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare
make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-72.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-30.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-30.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
Washer
Windshield Washer Solvent.
Engine oil which meets Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
(Except
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
6.0L V8 Engine) starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Power Steering Fluid
(Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Power Steering
System
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Engine Oil
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Key Lock
Cylinders
(6.0L V8 Engine Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
Only)
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Chassis Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
specifications.
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Front Axle
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinge and
Linkage,
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
Folding Seats,
and Fuel
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115. With a
complete drain and refill add
5.5 ounces (163 ml) of Limited-Slip
Axle Lubricant Additive
Door Hinge
Rear Axle
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(Part No. U.S. 3634770,
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
Transfer Case (Part No. U.S. 12378508,
in Canada 10953626).
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol meeting
Latch, Pivots, requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Spring Anchor, LB or GC-LB.
and
Release Pawl
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Part Number
24208576
ACDelco Part Number
24208576
15036141
A2014C
4.2L L6
89017342
89017524
PF61
PF48
5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6
12598004
12609877
41-103
41-985
5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
Wiper Blades
Front – 22 in (56 cm)
Rear – 13 in (33 cm)
12368668
15232655
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, call the
Saab Customer Assistance Center, in the U.S., at
1-800-955-9007. In Canada, call Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999 (English and
French).
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Saab, remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both Saab and your Saab dealer are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined
in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. Saab reserves the right
to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada Limited, on behalf
of Saab Automobile, A.B., wants you to be aware of
its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Saab Customer
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/saab
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Saab dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Saab − www.saab.com
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Saab Merchandise — www.saabexpressions.com
Help Center — www.saabusa.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
General Motors of Canada, Limited
Customer Assistance Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999 (English and French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Saab has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Saab by dialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-852–9001.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Customer Assistance Offices
Saab encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or
e-mail Saab, refer to the addresses below.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
United States — Customer Assistance
Saab Customer Assistance Center
Saab Automobile USA
P.O. Box 33166
Detroit, MI 48232-5166
www.Saabusa.com
1-800-955-9007
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Saab dealer for warranty service,
or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven.
Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 4 years/50,000 miles
(80 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Saab and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
Saab and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the
right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if
they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.
start a dead battery.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
4 years/50,000 miles (80 000 km) New Vehicle
Bumper-to-Bumper Limited Warranty period.
Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons,
the driver must present identification before this
service is given.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saab helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saab for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be
limited and must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Saab reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine Saab Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
Saab Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine Saab parts can help
maintain your Saab New Vehicle Warranty.
Saab also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your Saab dealer may have a collision
repair center with Saab-trained technicians and state of
the art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision
repair center that has Saab-trained technicians and
comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment Saab part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your Saab New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your Saab vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
Saab vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with Saab
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than Saab and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your Saab New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine Saab Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a Saab dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call Saab Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
Saab recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine Saab parts or recycled original Saab parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
Saab vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saab.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine Saab parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
Saab parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair
limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify Saab.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-955-9007, or write:
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Saab Customer Assistance Center
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999 (English or French),
or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model Saab 9-7x vehicles. To
request an order form, please specify year and model
name of the vehicle.
Your Saab vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer technician service your
vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption
or average speed. These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
Saab will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that Saab collects or receives may also be used for
Saab research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saab vehicles does
not use or record personal information or link with any
other Saab system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-29
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-86
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-24
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
